LG | HT306SU | Owner's Manual | LG HT306SU Owner's manual

LG HT306SU Owner's manual
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﴪﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﲆ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﹰ‬
‫)‪HT306SU (HT306SU, SH36SU-S/C/W‬‬
‫‪P/NO : MFL66983891‬‬
‫‪12:19:21‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳑﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ )ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻲ( ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﳚﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﻇﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺼﲔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﳞﺪﻑ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﴤﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺭﺃﺱ ﺳﻬﻢ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ‪ -‬ﺇﱃ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﻬﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﻄﲑ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺰﻭﻟﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﺎﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻳﻨﺒﺊ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻷﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﲥﺪﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺠﺐ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ )ﺧﺪﻣﺔ( ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﲈﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﰊ‬
‫ﻳﻮﴅ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﳐﺼﺼﺔ؛‬
‫ﺑﻤﻌﻨﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺰﻭﺩ ﺳﻮ￯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﲠﺎ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻚ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﹰﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﹸﲢ ﹼﻤﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻕ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻄﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﻜﻮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻮﺍﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﴩﻭﺧﺔ‬
‫ﺗﹸﻌﺘﱪ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﻄﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳ ﹰﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻓﱰﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺗﻀﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺷﻜﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺎﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﺰﻋﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺃﺧﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻏﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻢ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻮﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺜﻨﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺘﺒﺎﺳﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﴚ ﻓﻮﻗﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﳊﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳜﺮﺝ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺿﻴﻖ ﻛﺨﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﻛﺘﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﺎﺙ ﻣﺸﺎﲠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﲈﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼﹰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﺎﺟﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻏﲑ‪ .‬ﺍﳌﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺧﻄﲑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﴍ ﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﺎﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ‪ .‬ﻻ ﲢﺪﻕ ﰲ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﳚﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﲈﺀ )ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﻗﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﺛﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﳑﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻛﺄﻭﺍﲏ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﲆ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪12:19:23‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺫﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﳏﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﳐﺘﺰﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﻨﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﻜﴘ‬
‫ﻟﻠﱰﻛﻴﺐ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﳊﻴﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﻄﺮ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻋﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻢ ﻭﲣﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻪ ﰲ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﲣﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪ .‬ﻳﻮﴅ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﳐﺘﺰﻧﺔ ﻟﻸﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﳚﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﳚﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﲈﺀ )ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﻗﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﺛﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﳑﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻛﺄﻭﺍﲏ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﲆ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﴩ‬
‫ﳛﻈﺮ ﺑﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺚ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﺟﲑ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﴩ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﲆ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳊﲈﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﳌﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﴍﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ .Macrovision‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﲈﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺸﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻃﺒﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﱰﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﲑﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪ .‬ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﴩ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺧﺼﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪ ،Macrovision‬ﻭﳐﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﺍﳌﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﱂ ﺗﺮﺧﺺ ﴍﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ Macrovision‬ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﲢﻈﺮ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻥ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﲤﺎ ﹰﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺯﻳﻒ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﰲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﻱ ‪ 525‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،625‬ﻳﻮﴅ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺧﺮﺝ ”ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ“‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﺅﻻﺕ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ 525p‬ﻭ‪ ،625p‬ﻓﱪﺟﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﳚﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻋﲆ ]‪) [Mastered‬ﻣﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ(‬
‫ﳉﻌﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ‪ LG‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﲆ ‪Live File System‬‬
‫)ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ‪.LG‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ‪/‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﻲ‪ :‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪(Windows Vista‬‬
‫‪12:19:23‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺳﲈﺕ ﻓﺮﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫– ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﴍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﺎﱄ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫– ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫– ﻭﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ &‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫– ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﴍﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫– ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫– ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫– ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﳐﺮﺝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫– ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫– ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫– ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪AUX IN‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﳏﻤﻮﻝ ‪PORT. (Portable) IN‬‬
‫– ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫– ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫‪12:19:23‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫– ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫– ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻱ ﰲ ﺩﻱ )‪(DVD Menu‬‬
‫– ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻱ ﰲ ﺩﻱ‬
‫– ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ‬
‫– ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ‪ 1.5‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫– ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫– ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﻲ‬
‫– ﺗﻐﲑ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟـ‬
‫"‪"®DivX‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫– ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﱪﳎﺔ‬
‫– ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫– ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﴩﳛﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫– ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﴩﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫– ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫– ﳐﻔﻒ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬
‫– ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‬
‫– ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫– ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫– ﺍﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫– ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )‪(ID3 TAG‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺫﺍﻋﺔ‬
‫– ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫– ﺿﺒﻂ ﳏﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‬
‫– ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬
‫– ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺇﻑ ﺇﻡ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫– ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ "ﳏﻴﻄﻲ"‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫– ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫– ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ "‪"USB‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫– ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪5‬ﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫– ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪ (Setup Menu‬ﻭﺍﳋﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ )‪(LANGUAGE‬‬
‫– ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪(DISPLAY‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪(AUDIO‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ )‪) (Lock‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ(‬
‫– ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )‪(Others‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 4‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪6.‬‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫– ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫– ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱰﺍﺧﻴﺺ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪12:19:23‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫ﺳﲈﺕ ﻓﺮﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﴍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻭﻓﺤﺼﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺇﱃ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﺎﱄ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ HD‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪12:19:23‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪ FM‬ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ )‪(1‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ)‪/(1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ )‪(1‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪(1‬‬
‫‪ AM‬ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ )‪(1‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ DVD±R/ RW‬ﻭ‪CD-R/ RW‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ DivX‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ‪ WMA‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .JPEG‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫‪ DVD±RW/ DVD±R‬ﺃﻭ ‪ CD-RW/ CD-R‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺰﻳﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪)DVD-VIDEO‬ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ 8‬ﺳﻢ‪ 12/‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﴍﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺟﲑﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DVD±R‬ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ 8‬ﺳﻢ‪ 12/‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪) DVD-RW‬ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ 8‬ﺳﻢ‪ 12/‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD VR‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﺖ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺘﻬﺎ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ :DVD+R‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺘﲔ ﹰ‬
‫‪) DVD+RW‬ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ 8‬ﺳﻢ‪ 12/‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻁ ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺪﳎﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ CD-R/ CD-RW‬ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﳌﺪﳎﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﴍﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ &‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ” & “ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻳﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﴍﺣﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﰲ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻲ‬
‫‪12:19:23‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫‪u‬‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫>‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ DVD-Video، DVD±R/RW‬ﰲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ VR‬ﻭﺍﳌﻜﺘﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ‪/USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ‪/USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻣﻨﻊ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺃﴐﺍﺭ ﳏﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺇﺳﺎﺀﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻲ‪ .‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﻠﺼﻖ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﰲ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ”‪) “ALL‬ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻛﺮﻭﻱ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻠﻪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫”‪) “Check Regional Code‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ( ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫ﴍﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ)‪ (MP3‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ)‪ (MP3‬ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ MP3/ WMA‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﳏﺪﻭﺩ ﻛﲈ ﻳﲇ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﲠﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ‪MP3/ WMA‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻲ‪ :‬ﺿﻤﻦ ‪ 32‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪ ،(MP3‬ﺿﻤﻦ ‪ 32‬ﺇﱃ‬
‫‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻞ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪.(WMA‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ (USB‬ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ‬
‫)‪ 2.0 (USB‬ﻭ )‪1.1 (USB‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ "‪"USB‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪ :‬ﺿﻤﻦ ‪ 32‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 320‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ ،(MP3‬ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫‪ 40‬ﺇﻝ ‪ 192‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪.(WMA‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﲢﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﴡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪.999‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪“.mp3”/ “.wma” :‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ "‪ "USB‬ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻀﻌﺔ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﰲ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Easy-CD Creator‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.ISO9660‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ "‪ "USB‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﲤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟـ‬
‫"‪ "USB‬ﺃﻭ ﳏﻮﺭ "‪."USB‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﳏﺪﻭ ﹰﺩﺍ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﱃ‬
‫)‪ (1 000‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﺪﻋﻮﻡ ‪v9، v8، v7، v2 :‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪ISO9660/ JOLIET :‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﴡ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 2 048 x 2 760‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﴡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪.999‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺤﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ "‪ "USB‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﳌﻨﻊ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺪﻋﻢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ NTFS‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ )‪ FAT(16/32‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺍﳌﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﳏﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ "‪"USB‬‬
‫ﺻﻠﺐ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﴢ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﲣﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪“.jpg” :‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪ISO9660/ JOLIET :‬‬
‫‪12:19:23‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 8‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪DivX‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DivX‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺗﺮﲨﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ DivX‬ﰲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 45‬ﺣﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺭﻣﺰ ﹰﺍ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﰲ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ ،DivX‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫» _ » ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ‪) 576 x 720 :‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 30‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻛﻼﳘﺎ ﻣﻌ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ DivX‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫"‪".avi"، ".mpg "، ".mpeg "، "divx.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪SubRip (*.srt/ *.txt)، SAMI (*.smi)،‬‬
‫‪SubStation Alpha (*.ssa/ *.txt)، MicroDVD‬‬
‫‪(*.sub/ *.txt)، SubViewer 2.0 (*.sub/ *.txt)،‬‬
‫)‪VobSub(*.sub‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ Codec‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪:‬‬
‫‪“DIVX3.xx”، “DIVX4.xx”، “DIVX5.xx”،‬‬
‫‪“MP4V3”، “3IVX”.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪:‬‬
‫”‪“WMA”، “MP3”، “PCM”، “AC3‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻲ‪ :‬ﺿﻤﻦ ‪ 32‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪ ،(MP3‬ﺿﻤﻦ ‪ 32‬ﺇﱃ‬
‫‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻞ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪.(WMA‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪ :‬ﺿﻤﻦ ‪ 32‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 320‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ ،(MP3‬ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫‪ 40‬ﺇﻝ ‪ 192‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪.(WMA‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻘﺔ ﰲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﴍ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﲈ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.DivX‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ DivX‬ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ‪ ،DivXspec‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪12:19:23‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 9‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫‪4 5 6‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪DVD/CD‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ c‬ﻓﺘﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ )‪(B‬‬
‫‪ d‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )‪(F‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﱰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ e‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ )‪(d/M‬‬
‫‪ f‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪(Z‬‬
‫‪TUNING (-/+) (c/v), SKIP/SCAN (-/+) g‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﲆ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻒ ‪.c/v‬‬
‫‪12:19:23‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪ h‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪2 /1‬‬
‫‪ i‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪ PORT.(Portable) IN j‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪(VOL.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(!/1‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 10‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ c‬ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ )‪(FM/ AM‬‬
‫‪ d‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﳐﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪MONITOR (VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﱪ ﻣﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪12:19:24‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪ e‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪AUX (L/ R) INPUT‬‬
‫‪ f‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪HDMI OUT‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT VIDEO (PROGRESSIVE SCAN) g‬‬
‫)‪OUTPUT (Y PB PR‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﱪ ﻣﺪﺍﺧﻞ ‪.Y PB PR‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 11‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ : POWER‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫‪ : OPEN/CLOSE‬ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻳﻐﻠﻘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ : TITLE‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﳊﺎﱄ ﳛﺘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• • • • • • • • ‪• • • • • • • b‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ : DISPLAY‬ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : MENU‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪ : SETUP‬ﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ : PRESET (WS‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ :TUN. (-/+‬ﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﳏﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪) W/S/A/D‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﲔ‪/‬ﺃﻋﲆ‪/‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ(‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ : ENTER (b‬ﻟﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ : FUNCTION‬ﺍﺧﱰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : SLEEP‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻛﻲ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﳏﺪﺩ‪) .‬ﺍﳋﺎﻓﺖ‪ :‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ‪(.‬‬
‫‪12:19:24‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪ : SUBTITLE‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ‪) SUBTITLE‬ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻝ ‪ : 9‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻗﻤﺔ‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• • • • • • • • ‪• • • • • • • e‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ LG‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﻭﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﰲ‬
‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ LG‬ﹰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪POWER‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺯﺭ ‪PR/CH‬‬
‫)‪) (-/+‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : PROG./MEMO.‬ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ :RETURN (x‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﺍﺀ ﰲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳋﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ : STOP (Z‬ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : ECHO VOL -/+‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﺪ￯‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ : REC (X‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﴍ ‪.USB‬‬
‫• • • • • • • • ‪• • • • • • • c‬‬
‫)‪ : PAUSE/STEP (M‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• • • • • • • • ‪• • • • • • • a‬‬
‫‪ : CLEAR‬ﻳﺰﻳﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪) Program‬ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ : RESOLUTION‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‬
‫‪.COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫‪ : PLAY (d), MO./ST.‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﳛﺪﺩ ‪.Mono/ Stereo‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ ﻇﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﹸﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ (AAA‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﱟ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﻭ‪5‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫)‪: EQ$ (EQUALIZER effect‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : MIC VOL -/+‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : VOCAL FADER‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ ،karaoke‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺧﻔﺾ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻐﻨﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ : SKIP (C/V‬ﺍﺫﻫﺐ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫‪ /‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ‪ /‬ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ :SCAN (c/v‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• • • • • • • • ‪• • • • • • • d‬‬
‫‪ : REPEAT/RANDOM‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪) .‬ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ(‬
‫‪ : MUTE‬ﻟﻜﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ : VOL (Volume) (+/-‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ : LG EQ (9‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬
‫"ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ" ﺃﻭ "ﳏﲇ" ﳌﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪.LG EQ‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 12‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻭﺣﺮﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪) -‬ﻧﺎﻗﺺ( ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪) +‬ﻣﻮﺟﺐ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﺜﺎﻻﹰ ﻋﲆ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﲈﺕ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻷﳖﺎ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﳑﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺤﻴﻄﻲ‪ ،‬ﳚﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﰐ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﲆ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﴪ￯ )‪ /(L‬ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )‪:(R‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‪ :‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﺃﻋﲆ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺤﻴﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﴪ￯ )‪ /(L‬ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺤﻴﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )‪:(R‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﲈﻋﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻗﻠﻴ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‬
‫>‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﺒﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺪﳞﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﰲ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ*‪.‬‬
‫*ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ :‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺟﻬﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻓﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ‬
‫ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﳌﺘﺤﺪﺙ )ﺿﻤﻨﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﰐ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﰐ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﻛﱪ￯‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺇﲡﺎﻫﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﱃ ﺣﺪ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﹸﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﰐ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﻳﺮﳞﺎ ﻗﻠﻴ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﲆ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻘﺪ ﳛﺪﺙ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﻟﻸﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﴢ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﹰ ﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪12:19:24‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 13‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺇﺣﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻋﺘﲈﺩﺍ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺪ￯‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﳐﺮﺝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﲠﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺃ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ™HDMI‬ﻋﺎﱄ‬
‫ﺍﻟﴪﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﳐﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﻋﲆ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﱰﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﻋﲆ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫>‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﴍﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺇﱃ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻋﱪ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﲆ ‪) HDMI‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫‪12:19:24‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 14‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﲑ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﳌﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺧﺮﺝ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪) RESOLUTION‬ﺩﻗﺔ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪) 480i -‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (576i‬ﺃﻭ ‪) 480p‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،(576p‬ﺃﻭ ‪720p‬‬
‫‪ 1080i‬ﺃﻭ ‪.1080p‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻣﺴﺢ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻲ( ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ‪.Y PB PR‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺳﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﳚﻮﺯ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﲆ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ 1 080‬ﺑﻴﺖ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ‪) .(HD‬ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺞ ‪ HD‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ(‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﻔﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﲑ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ RESOLUTION‬ﻣﺮﺍﺭ ﹰﺍ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﲤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﰲ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﺘﻐﻠﺐ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﳎﺪ ﹰﺩﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ HDMI‬ﺑـ‪، HDCP‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻐﲑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﴬ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﲢﺪﺙ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ، HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺃ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ™HDMI‬ﻋﺎﱄ ﺍﻟﴪﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﳐﺮﺟﺎﺕ ‪ . HDMI‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪RESOLUTION‬‬
‫)ﺩﻗﺔ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪480i -‬‬
‫)ﺃﻭ ‪ (576i‬ﺃﻭ ‪) 480p‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،(576p‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 720p 1080i‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪.1080p‬‬
‫‪12:19:24‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 15‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪ (MONITOR‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﰲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺳﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪AUX IN‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳌﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ‪AUX‬‬
‫)ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﲔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﳐﺮﺝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ )ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( ﺍﻷﻳﴪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪12:19:24‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 16‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﳏﻤﻮﻝ‬
‫‪PORT. (Portable) IN‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ )‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ‪ PMP‬ﺍﻟﺦ( ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫‪.PORT. IN‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪ FM/AM‬ﺍﳌﺰﻭﺩ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﻟﻠﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪ AM‬ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪.AM‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪ FM‬ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪.FM‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ ،MP3‬ﺍﻝ‪...‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪) USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ ،MP3‬ﺍﻟﺦ( ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﰲ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪ AM‬ﺍﳊﻠﻘﻲ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪ FM‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪ ،FM‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻈﻞ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺰﻉ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺧﱰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪STOP (Z‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﲔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪12:19:24‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 17‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ DVD/CD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫)‪.(FUNCTION‬‬
‫ﻛﲈ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 18‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪.22‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪.(SETUP‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪.[Setup‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪5‬ﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ,‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪(Setup Menu‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﳋﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﱄ ﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻤﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻛﻠﻐﺔ ﺃﻭﻟ ﹼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪(POWER‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪ (SETUP‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ )‪(RETURN‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪[Setup‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪w/s‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪.Prev‬‬
‫‪WS‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪ [Setup‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ‬
‫‪Speaker 5.1] 5.1‬‬
‫‪.[Setup‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪Select‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ WSAD‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫)‪.(ENTER‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ AD‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ]‪ [Enter‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫)‪ (ENTER‬ﻹﳖﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪12:19:24‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 18‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‪(Menu Language‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Setup‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ /‬ﺗﺮﲨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ /‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫)‪(Disc Audio / Disc Subtitle / Disc Menu‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﻀﻠﻬﺎ ﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ( ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Original‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﲠﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Other‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ‬
‫)‪ (ENTER‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﻓ ﹰﻘﺎ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .34‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ (CLEAR‬ﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) Off‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺮﲨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ([‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪(DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﹸﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )‪(TV Aspect‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﻓ ﹰﻘﺎ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[4:3‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮ ﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.4:3‬‬
‫]‪[16:9‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ‪.16:9‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪(Display Mode‬‬
‫ﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ‪ ،4:3‬ﻓﺈﻧﻚ ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲠﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Letterbox‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﴍﻃﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﲇ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ )‪(LANGUAGE‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫]‪[Panscan‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪) .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪/‬ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻏﲑ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻊ ‪ ،Pan Scan‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪(.Letterbox‬‬
‫‪12:19:24‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 19‬‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪(AUDIO‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ‪(5.1 Speaker setup) 5.1‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﳏﻠﻞ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪ 5.1‬ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪.(SETUP‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ WS‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺎﺕ )‪ (AUDIO‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ‪.D‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ WS‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ‪5.1‬‬
‫)‪ (5.1 Speaker setup‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.D‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺿﻐﻂ ﻓﺘﺢ )‪(ENTER‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ‪[5.1 Speaker setup] 5.1‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﳏﻈﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻟﺒﻲ ﺩﳚﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Size‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Volume‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ AD‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Distance‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ AD‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.WSAD‬‬
‫‪ .7‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﻓﺘﺢ )‪ (RETURN‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪12:19:24‬‬
‫]‪[Speaker‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪،DVD Receiver‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﲈﻋﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺳﲈﻋﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻟﻠﺴﺎﻣﻊ ﰲ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ AD‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻭﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Test‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ AD‬ﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﺳﲈﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 20‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪Vocal‬‬
‫]‪ [On‬ﻟﺪﻣﺞ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪ karaoke‬ﰲ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﱰﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ karaoke DVD‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻝ ‪(HD AV Sync) AV‬‬
‫ﻭﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻓﺎﺭﻕ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫)‪ .(Digital TV‬ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﱰﺓ ﻟﺘﺄﺧﲑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻛﻲ ‘ﻳﻨﺘﻈﺮ’ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻭ ﹸﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ؛ ‪) HD AV Sync‬ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﰐ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺮﺋﻲ(‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪) WS‬ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ( ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﲑ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺼﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺑﲔ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ‪ 300‬ﻣﻠﲇ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﻳﻮﻛﻲ )‪(Semi Karaoke‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ /‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﳎﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[On‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﻨﺎﺀ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Off‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻭﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻭ‪ DVD Karaoke‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳍﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ‪ Semi Karaoke‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ SETUP‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪12:19:24‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ )‪) (Lock‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ(‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫)‪.(Area Code‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪ [Lock‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.D‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.D‬‬
‫ﺕ ]‪ ،[Lock‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ )‪ .(ENTER‬ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ )‪ (ENTER‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻜﺒﺖ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫)‪ ،(ENTER‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺢ )‪.(CLEAR‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.WS‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ )‪ (ENTER‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﲏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.WS‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ )‪ (ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ )‪(Rating‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪) DRC‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ(‬
‫ﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪Dolby Digital‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﲆ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﲑ‪.‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﻱ ﰲ ﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻔﺔ ﻋﲆ ﳏﺘﻮﺍﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﺼﻨﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ]‪ [Rating‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ]‪ [Lock‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.D‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ )‪.(ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 8‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.WS‬‬
‫]‪[Rating 1-8‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )‪ (1‬ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺛﲈﻧﻴﺔ )‪ (8‬ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Unlock‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ ﻏﲑ ﻧﺸﻂ ﻭﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ )‪ (ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 21‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ )‪(Password‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﲑﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ]‪ [Password‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ]‪ [Lock‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.D‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻛﲈ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ )‪ (ENTER‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ]‪ .[Change‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫)‪ .(ENTER‬ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫) ‪ (ENTER‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪ (SETUP‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪ (SETUP‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ 6‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ”‪ “210499‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻮﻝ )‪ .(ENTER‬ﺗﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )‪(Others‬‬
‫‪DivX VOD‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪:DIVX‬‬
‫‪ ®DivX‬ﻫﻮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪.DivX‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺭﺳﻤ ﹰﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ ®DivX Certified‬ﹸﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .DivX‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ www.divx.com‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ ﺇﱃ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DivX‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DIVX‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ ®DivX Certified‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﳚﺐ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DivX‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ )‪ (VOD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺷﱰﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ‪ vod.divx.com‬ﻋﲆ ﺍﻹﻧﱰﻧﺖ ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﲈﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Register‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Deregister‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ )‪(Area Code‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﲑﻫﺎ ﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻑ ﻳﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ ،DVD‬ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.33‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ]‪ [Area Code‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ]‪ [Lock‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.D‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﲨﻴﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ DivX® VOD‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻻ ﻋﱪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻛﲈ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫)‪.(ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.WS‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ )‪ (ENTER‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﲏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.WS‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ )‪ (ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪12:19:25‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 22‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﻓﺘﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ )‪ (OPEN/CLOSE‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ DVD/CD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪.(FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ )ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‪ /‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ( ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.WSAD‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫"‪ "DivX‬ﻭ "ﺇﻡ ﰊ ﺛﺮﻱ" "‪/"MP3‬ﻭ "ﻭﻳﻨﺎﻣﺐ" "‪ "WMA‬ﻭ‬
‫"‪ "JPEG‬ﳎﺘﻤﻌﺔ‪ ,‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ .MENU‬ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ " ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ" ﺍﳊﻈﺮ ‪ ,‬ﺍﺧﱰ ﻣﻠﻔ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪MENU‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻞ ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻋﲆ ‪ M‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪.Frame-by-Frame‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻖ‪ /‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺗﲔ ﻟﻔﱰﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﺰﺓ ﻋﲆ ‪C‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ .‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻪ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻪ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻄﺌﺔ ﴎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪12:19:25‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻞ ‪d‬‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ V‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ C‬ﻟﻠﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻞ ‪Z‬‬
‫ﻧﻔﺬ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺿﻐﻄﺎ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ‪ v‬ﺃﻭ ‪ c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﴎﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﴪﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ .(PLAY‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ ،REPEAT/RANDOM‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﰲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺑﻄﻲﺀ )‪(SCAN‬‬
‫)‪ v‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﴪﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﴘ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪(.Divx‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 23‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺩﻱ ﰲ ﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‪.(Menu‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ DISPLAY‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﴫ ﹰﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ WS‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.AD‬‬
‫‪ – Title‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ‪/‬ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.WSAD‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ‪.PLAY‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻱ ﰲ ﺩﻱ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪ – Audio‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺩﻱ ﰲ ﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – Subtitle‬ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – Angle‬ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – Sound‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.MENU‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – Chapter‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪ /‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ‪ /‬ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – Time‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﴤ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻱ ﰲ ﺩﻱ )‪(DVD Menu‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﱂ ﻳﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﳜﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ )‪.(TITLE‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.WSAD‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ‪.PLAY‬‬
‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ‬
‫‪ry‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ) ] ( ‪) SUBTITLE‬ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ( ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ‪ 1.5‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﴪﻋﺔ ‪ 1.5‬ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺃﴎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﴪﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ PLAY(d‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﻧﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪ “dx1.5‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ PLAY(d‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪12:19:25‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 24‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﱪﳎﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻌﲔ ﰲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﲣﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﰲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﲆ ‪30‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍ‪/‬ﻣﻠ ﹰﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﻋﺮﺽ )‪ (DISPLAY‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ WS‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪--:--‬‬
‫‪.“--:‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﰲ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﲏ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﲔ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻣﺎ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫)‪ (CLEAR‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻭﻋﴩ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﻭﻋﴩﻳﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ”‪ “11020‬ﻋﱪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ )‪ (ENTER‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪tu‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ DVD/CD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪.(FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ PROG./MEMO.‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫){ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪ [List‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ WS‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ )‪ (ENTER‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫)‪ (ENTER‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﱪﳎﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﻲ‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ PROG./MEMO.‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ){ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜ ﹰﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﲑ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫ﻟـ "‪"®DivX‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ‪) SUBTITLE‬ﺗﺮﲨﺔ( ﳌﺪﺓ ‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﲏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ AD‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪) SUBTITLE‬ﺗﺮﲨﺔ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ PROG./MEMO.‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ){ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ WS‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪yr‬‬
‫‪12:19:25‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺢ )‪(CLEAR‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ WSAD‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[Clear All‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﲤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،USB‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 25‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﴩﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﴩﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ WSAD‬ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ )~( ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪) ENTER‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫)ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺀ ﰲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﴩﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ DVD/CD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪.(FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ WS‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫)‪.(ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ WS‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ )‪.(ENTER‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪WS‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ )‪ (ENTER‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫)‪ .(PLAY‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫)‪ (STOP‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ )‪.(JPEG menu‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﴩﳛﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ WSAD‬ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺭﻣﺰ )‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﴩﳛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﴎﻋﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﴩﳛﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AD‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﲤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ )‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﴩﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪w/s‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪a/d‬‬
‫‪Prev./ Next‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫‪Close‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪Hide‬‬
‫‪12:19:25‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪W/S‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪A/D‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﻮﺭﺍﺀ ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﲈﺕ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﴩﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﻧﻮﻡ )‪ (SLEEP‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺟﻴﻞ ﺑﲔ ‪10‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ 180‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﻧﻮﻡ )‪.(SLEEP‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺿﻐﻄﺎ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺍ ﻋﲆ ‪ SLEEP‬ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫”‪ ،“SLEEP 10‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‪ SLEEP‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫”‪.“SLEEP 10‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﳐﻔﻒ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ SLEEP‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﲆ ‪ SLEEP‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﳋﻔﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 26‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳍﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪" MUTE‬ﺻﺎﻣﺖ" ﰲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﱰﻙ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) Stop‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﳌﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﱄ ﲬﺲ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﳚﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ" ﰲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﲆ )‪ PAUSE/STEP (M‬ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﲬﺲ ﺛﻮﺍﲏ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎ ﹰﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﻳﻮﻛﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﻐﻨﻲ ﰲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ‪ ...MP3/ WMA/ CD) .‬ﺍﻟﺦ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪، VOCAL FADER‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﰲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ "‪ "ON FADER‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ VOCAL FADER‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ‪VOCAL‬‬
‫‪ FADER‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺫﺍﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪.FM/AM‬‬
‫)ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(17‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ )‪.(FUNCTION‬ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ‪FM/AM‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﳏﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﲆ )‪ TUN. (-/+‬ﳌﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﲔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﺩﺩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﰲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﳏﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺿﻐﻄﺎ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺍ ﻋﲆ )‪.TUN. (-/+‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ‪ VOL.‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺿﻐﻄﺎ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺍ ﻋﲆ ‪ + VOL‬ﺃﻭ – ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ )‪ (MUTE‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )‪(ID3 TAG‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪MP3‬ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪) DISPLAY‬ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪12:19:25‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 27‬‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﳏﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ 50‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪ FM/AM‬ﺿﺒﻄﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ )‪ (FUNCTION‬ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ‪FM/AM‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﱰﺩﺩ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻒ )‪.(TUN) (-/+‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ ،PROG./MEMO.‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﺪﺩ ﳏﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ )‪ PRESET (WS‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.PROG./MEMO.‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺤﻄﺔ ﳐﺰﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 2‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 5‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﳏﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ PROG./MEMO.‬ﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺘﲔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ‪) ERASE ALL‬ﳏﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ( ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ PROG./MEMO.‬ﳌﺤﻮ ﻛﻞ ﳏﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺇﻑ ﺇﻡ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ PLAY (d) (MO./ST.‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﱄ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺳﱰﻳﻮ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺩﺍﺋﲈ ﻣﺎ ﳛﺴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪12:19:25‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 28‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﲥﺎ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻭﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻴﺒﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ "ﳏﻴﻄﻲ"‬
‫ﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺠﻬﺰﺓ ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻐﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪.EQ/ LG EQ‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ‪ EQ/ LG EQ‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ‪ AD‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪.EQ/ LG EQ‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳉﻮ ﺍﳌﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﴏ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ "‪ "Equalizer‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﳌﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪NAT PLUS‬‬
‫‪NATURAL‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﺮﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﲇ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﳌﺤﲇ‬
‫ﳌﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪AUTO EQ‬‬
‫‪POP‬‬
‫‪CLASSIC‬‬
‫‪JAZZ‬‬
‫‪ROCK‬‬
‫‪MP3 OPT‬‬
‫‪BASS‬‬
‫‪VIRTUAL‬‬
‫‪NORMAL‬‬
‫‪12:19:25‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪(DANGDUT/ ARABIC/‬‬
‫‪PERSIAN/ INDIA/‬‬
‫‪REGUETON/ MERENGUE/‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪ NAT PLUS‬ﻫﻮ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺻﻮﰐ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﰲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪SAMBA/ SALSA/ CUMBIA/‬‬
‫)‪AFRO‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺸﺎﲠ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻏﺎﲏ ‪MP3 ID3 Tag‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻔﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺟﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﲈﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﲈ ﻳﻤﻨﺤﻚ ﺷﻌﻮﺭ ﹰﺍ ﺑﺄﻧﻚ ﰲ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻠﺔ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﻭﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳉﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﺳﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﹸﲢﺴﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﱰﺩﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ BASS‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺱ ﺑﻼﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱰﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﳋﻔﻴﺾ( ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺤﻴﻄﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 29‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ "ﺑﺎﳌﺪﺧﻞ" ﻣﻮﺻﻞ )ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ (‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺃﻭﻛﺲ "‪ "AUX‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.POWER‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ PORTABLE‬ﺃﻭ ‪ AUX‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ "‪"USB‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ "‪ "USB‬ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ DVD/CD‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪.(FUNCTION‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﱪﳎﺔ ‪ -‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﱪﳎﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ "‪ "USB‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﺪﳎﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ MP3/ WMA‬ﻣﺪﳎﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﻨﺎﻣﺐ ‪ /‬ﺇﻡ ﰊ ﺛﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ) ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻨﺰﻉ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ "‪ "USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ‬
‫"‪ ."USB‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ "‪ "USB‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫" ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ‪ "USB‬ﺃﻭ " ﺧﻄﺄ " ﺃﻭ " ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ" ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺎﺭﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ HDD‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻋﲆ ‪ 128‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻔﱰﺓ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﲣﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 999‬ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻓﻴﲈ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﲡﺴﻴﻠﻪ ﻛﲈ ﻳﲇ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﳎﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪MP3/ WMA‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.X REC‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.Z STOP‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﺧﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﺑﲈ ﰲ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻛ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﴩ ﻭﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻋﺘﺪﺍﺀ ﳎﺮﻡ‪ .‬ﻻ ﳚﻮﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﳍﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻦ ﻋﲆ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺣﱰﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﴩ‬
‫‪12:19:25‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 30‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺝ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻬﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺇﱃ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺳﲈﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪. DVD‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﳌﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﰲ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻪ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﻮﰐ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺩﻳﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﲈﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﲈﺵ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﺼﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻮﻉ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻷﻋﲆ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﲈﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﳘﻬﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪CD‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﲈﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﲈﺵ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﳏﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﺤﻄﺔ ﻳﺪﻭ ﹰﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﳏﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 28‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪DVD/CD‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﴍﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺒﺎﴍﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫‪ /‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﰲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 23‬ﻗﺪﻡ )‪ 7‬ﻣﱰ( ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻩ‪0‬ﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺄﺧﺮ￯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪12:19:25‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 31‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﲇ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﰲ‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺄﻗﴡ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﲈﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻐﻠﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﲈ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻐﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﺪﻭﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻊ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﲆ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻃﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺭﺷﺎﺵ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﺪ ﺍﳊﴩﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺢ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﰲ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﱰﻙ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻣﻄﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺃﻭﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺗﻼﺻﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻔﱰﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﹼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﲈﺷﻴﺔ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﲈﺷﻴﺔ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﺑﻤﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﻈﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻣﺮﻗﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻫﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ .‬ﺍﲪﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﺍﻓﻪ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺑﺼﲈﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﺒﻊ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺃﺑﺪ ﹰﺍ ﺑﻠﺼﻖ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﴍﻃﺔ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻆ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻀﻮﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﴍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﻻ ﺗﱰﻛﻪ ﰲ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﴍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺿﻌ ﹰﻔﺎ ﰲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺸﻮﻳﺸﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻗﲈﺵ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺮﻗﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻫﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺵ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﰲ ﴍﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﺍ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﳏﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻀﻌﻒ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪12:19:25‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 32‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﱰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻐﺎﻧﺴﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻨﺘﲔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﱰﺍﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺴﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻠﺠﻴﻜﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﹸﺑﻮﻟﹺﻴﻔﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﺍﺯﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻮﺩﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ AU‬ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ‬
‫‪ FR‬ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ‬
‫‪ BE‬ﺑﺮﻳﻄﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻈﻤﻰ‬
‫‪ GB‬ﻫﻮﻟﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫‪ AR‬ﻓﻨﻠﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫‪ AT‬ﺃﳌﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫‪ BT‬ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻧﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ BO‬ﺟﺮﻳﻦ ﻻﻧﺪ‬
‫‪ BR‬ﻫﻮﻧﺞ ﻛﻮﻧﺞ‬
‫‪ KH‬ﺍﳌﺠﺮ‬
‫‪ FI‬ﻣﻨﻐﻮﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫‪ DE‬ﻧﻴﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ MN‬ﲨﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﻠﻮﻓﺎﻛﻴﺎ‬
‫‪ MA‬ﺳﻠﻮﻓﻴﻨﻴﺎ‬
‫‪ NP‬ﺟﻨﻮﺏ ﺃﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‬
‫‪ NL‬ﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ ﺍﳉﻨﻮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ GR‬ﺟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻧﺘﻴﻞ ﺍﳍﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ AN‬ﺃﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫‪ HK‬ﻧﻴﺠﲑﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ NG‬ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ GL‬ﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻼﻧﺪﺍ‬
‫‪ NZ‬ﴎﻳﻼﻧﻜﺎ‬
‫‪ HU‬ﺍﻟﻨﺮﻭﻳﺞ‬
‫‪ NO‬ﺳﻮﻳﴪﺍ‬
‫‪ CL‬ﺇﻧﺪﻭﻧﻴﺴﻴﺎ‬
‫‪ ID‬ﺑﺎﻛﺴﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ PK‬ﺗﺎﻳﻼﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻮﻟﻮﻣﺒﻴﺎ‬
‫‪ CO‬ﺇﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫‪ IT‬ﺑﺎﺭﺍﺟﻮﺍﻱ‬
‫‪ PY‬ﺃﻭﻏﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻮﺳﺘﺎﺭﻳﻜﺎ‬
‫‪ CR‬ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ JP‬ﺑﻮﻟﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫‪ PL‬ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﲨﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻴﻚ‬
‫‪ CZ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻛﻮﺍﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫‪ EC‬ﻟﻮﻛﺴﻤﺒﻮﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻔﺎﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫‪ SV‬ﺍﳌﺎﻟﺪﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﲔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻧﻐﻮ‬
‫ﻛﺮﻭﺍﺗﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻧﲈﺭﻙ‬
‫ﻣﴫ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻴﻮﺑﻴﺎ‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪ CA‬ﺍﳍﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ CN‬ﺇﴎﺍﺋﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ CG‬ﺟﺎﻣﺎﻳﻜﺎ‬
‫‪ HR‬ﻛﻴﻨﻴﺎ‬
‫‪ DK‬ﻟﻴﺒﻴﺎ‬
‫‪ EG‬ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ ET‬ﺍﳌﻜﺴﻴﻚ‬
‫‪ IN‬ﻋﲈﻥ‬
‫‪ IL‬ﺑﻨﲈ‬
‫‪ JM‬ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺒﲔ‬
‫‪ KE‬ﺍﻟﱪﺗﻐﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ KW‬ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫‪ LY‬ﺭﻭﺳﻴﺎ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ LU‬ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ MY‬ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻐﺎﻝ‬
‫‪MV‬‬
‫‪MX‬‬
‫‪ OM‬ﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ PA‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺎ‬
‫‪ PH‬ﺃﻭﻛﺮﺍﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫‪ PT‬ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺟﻮﺍﻱ‬
‫‪ RO‬ﺃﻭﺯﺑﻜﺴﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ RU‬ﻓﻴﺘﻨﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ SA‬ﺯﻳﻤﺒﺎﺑﻮﻱ‬
‫‪SK‬‬
‫‪SI‬‬
‫‪ZA‬‬
‫‪KR‬‬
‫‪ES‬‬
‫‪LK‬‬
‫‪SE‬‬
‫‪CH‬‬
‫‪TW‬‬
‫‪TH‬‬
‫‪TR‬‬
‫‪UG‬‬
‫‪UA‬‬
‫‪US‬‬
‫‪UY‬‬
‫‪UZ‬‬
‫‪VN‬‬
‫‪ZW‬‬
‫‪SN‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺷﻴﲇ‬
‫‪12:19:26‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻓﻴﺠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪ FJ‬ﻣﻮﻧﺎﻛﻮ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪ MC‬ﺳﻨﻐﺎﻓﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫‪SG‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 33‬‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻐﺘﻚ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪) Disc Audio :‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ( ﻭ‪) Disc Subtitle‬ﺗﺮﲨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ( ﻭ‪Disc‬‬
‫‪) Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﻬﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫‪6577‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﻣﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪7289‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻣﻴﺰ ﹼﻳﺔ‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺫﺭﺑﻴﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪6590‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺳﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫‪6985‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺸﻜﲑﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻬﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻳﺘﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻐﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪6582‬‬
‫‪6583‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﲈﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪6588‬‬
‫‪6665‬‬
‫‪6678‬‬
‫‪6890‬‬
‫‪6672‬‬
‫‪6682‬‬
‫‪6671‬‬
‫‪7789‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻼﺭﻭﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪6669‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﺍﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪7282‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻧﲈﺭﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫‪6865‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫‪6978‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪6984‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳍﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺳﱪﺍﻧﺘﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻭﺯﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻠﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫‪12:19:26‬‬
‫‪8381‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﻟﻴﺸﻴﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫‪6570‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪6565‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪9072‬‬
‫‪6783‬‬
‫‪7876‬‬
‫‪6979‬‬
‫‪7079‬‬
‫‪7074‬‬
‫‪7073‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪7082‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪7684‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫‪7176‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻻﺟﺎﺱ‬
‫‪7771‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻓﺎﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻻﻳﺎﻻﻡ‬
‫‪7776‬‬
‫‪7089‬‬
‫ﺍﳉﻮﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪7565‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻮ ﻧﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪6976‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﳌﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪6869‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺎﻭﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺍﺛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﻦ ﻻﻧﺪ‬
‫‪7576‬‬
‫ﺍﳉﻮﺟﺎﺭﺍﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪7185‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺎﻧﻐﻮﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﱪﻳﺔ‬
‫‪7387‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻴﺒﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻮﺍﺭﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳍﺎﻭﺳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﳍﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺠﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﻠﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﺪﻭﻧﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫‪7178‬‬
‫‪7265‬‬
‫‪7273‬‬
‫‪7285‬‬
‫‪7383‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺎﻟﺪﻭﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻭﺭﻭ‬
‫‪7779‬‬
‫‪7778‬‬
‫‪7865‬‬
‫‪7869‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪7065‬‬
‫‪7165‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪7782‬‬
‫‪8065‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫‪7384‬‬
‫‪7773‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺮﻭﳚﻴﺔ‬
‫‪7378‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪7783‬‬
‫‪7879‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺷﺘﻮ‬
‫‪7365‬‬
‫‪7775‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻓﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪8368‬‬
‫‪8373‬‬
‫‪8375‬‬
‫‪8376‬‬
‫‪6983‬‬
‫‪8385‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺣﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪8387‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺟﺎﻟﻮﺝ‬
‫‪8476‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺟﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻮﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪7982‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻳﻼﻧﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫‪8083‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻧﺠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪8386‬‬
‫‪8471‬‬
‫‪8465‬‬
‫‪8469‬‬
‫‪8472‬‬
‫‪8479‬‬
‫‪8482‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﲈﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪8475‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﺗﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪8084‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻛﺮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪8575‬‬
‫‪7578‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻳﺘﻮ ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﻚ‬
‫‪8277‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺯﺑﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫‪8590‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺯﺍﺧﺎﺳﺘﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪7575‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻻﺑﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫‪8679‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪7579‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪8779‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﺸﻴﺔ‬
‫‪7473‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻟﻮ‬
‫‪9085‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻧﺎﺩﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻤﲑﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻏﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪7465‬‬
‫‪7583‬‬
‫‪7589‬‬
‫‪7585‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻭﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪7679‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫‪7686‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻨﺠﺎﻻ‬
‫‪7665‬‬
‫‪7678‬‬
‫ﻛﻮﻳﺘﺸﻮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻣﺴﻮﻳﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻜﺮﻳﺘ ﹼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﹼ‬
‫‪8076‬‬
‫‪8185‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪8279‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺘﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫‪8377‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻳﻠﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫‪8285‬‬
‫‪8365‬‬
‫ﺍﳉﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻜﺘﻠﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫‪7168‬‬
‫ﺇﻛﺴﻮﺯﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﴫﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪8372‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻮﺭﻭﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻝ ﴏﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺎ‬
‫‪8382‬‬
‫‪8378‬‬
‫‪8487‬‬
‫‪8582‬‬
‫‪8673‬‬
‫‪6789‬‬
‫‪8872‬‬
‫‪8979‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 34‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱰﺍﺧﻴﺺ‬
‫‪ ،HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻭ‪High-Definition‬‬
‫‪ ،Multimedia Interface‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺘﺼﺔ ﺑﻤﻨﺢ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫”‪ “DVD Logo‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﳌﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻟﱰﺍﺧﻴﺺ‬
‫ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﻖ‪/‬ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪ ®DivX‬ﻭ‪ ®DivX Certified‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ ‪ DivX‬ﻭﺗﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﱰﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﳌﻤﻨﻮﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪Dolby‬‬
‫‪ .Laboratories‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ‪ Dolby‬ﻭ‪ double-D‬ﻛﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟـ ‪.Dolby Laboratories‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪12:19:26‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 35‬‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﰲ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ(‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ 313 x 62.5 x 360‬ﻣﻢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ 2.9‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫‪ 41‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﳖﻴﺖ ﺇﱃ ‪ 95‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﳖﻴﺖ )‪ 5‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ‪ 35‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 5%‬ﺇﱃ ‪.90%‬‬
‫‪VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫)‪ 75 ،1.0 V (p-p‬ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺒﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪RCA jack x 1‬‬
‫)‪ 75 ،(Y) 1.0 V (p-p‬ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺒﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪RCA jack x 1‬‬
‫)‪ 75 ،(Pb)/(Pr) 0.7 V (p-p‬ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪RCA jack x 2‬‬
‫‪ 19‬ﺳﻨﹰﺎ )ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺃ‪( HDMI™ Connector ،‬‬
‫‪ 600، (0 dB،1 kHz) 2.0 Vrms‬ﺃﻭﻡ‪RCA jack (L،R) x 1،‬‬
‫‪) 0.5 Vrms‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺑﴫﻱ ‪ 3.5‬ﻣﻢ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫‪COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫‪) HDMI OUT‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺻﻮﺕ(‬
‫‪ANALOG AUDIO IN‬‬
‫‪PORT. IN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﱰﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺇﲨﺎﱄ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(USB‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻻﺳﱰﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺴﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻒ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻒ ‪AM‬‬
‫‪12:19:26‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﺃﺷﺒﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻼﺕ‪650 nm ،‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ NTSC/PAL‬ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ 20‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﱃ ‪ 20‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 96 ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 192 ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 80‬ﺩﻳﺴﺒﻞ‬
‫‪ % 0.05‬ﻋﲆ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 85‬ﺩﻳﺴﺒﻞ‬
‫‪DC 5 V 0 500 mA‬‬
‫‪ 45‬ﻭﺍﺕ ‪ 45 +‬ﻭﺍﺕ )‪ 3‬ﺃﻭﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﲑﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺴﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ 45‬ﻭﺍﺕ ‪ 45 +‬ﻭﺍﺕ )‪ 3‬ﺃﻭﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﲑﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ 45‬ﻭﺍﺕ )‪ 3‬ﺃﻭﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﲑﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ 45‬ﻭﺍﺕ ‪ 45 +‬ﻭﺍﺕ )‪ 3‬ﺃﻭﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﲑﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ 105‬ﻭﺍﺕ )‪ 4‬ﺃﻭﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 60‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ 87.5‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 108.0‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ‪ 87.50‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 108.00‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 522‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 1 620‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 520 ،‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 1 710‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ‪ 522‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 1 710‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 36‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮ￯‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ )ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫ﺻﺎﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮ￯‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ )ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫ﺻﺎﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮ￯‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ )ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫ﺻﺎﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺳﻠﺒﻲ ﻣﻜﱪ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮ￯‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ )ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫ﺻﺎﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻜﱪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺃﻭﻡ‬
‫‪ 45‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ 90‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ 91 x 100 x 123‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ 0.4‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻜﱪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺃﻭﻡ‬
‫‪ 45‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ 90‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ 91 x 100 x 123‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ 0.44‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻜﱪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺃﻭﻡ‬
‫‪ 45‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ 90‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ 91 x 100 x 133‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ 0.41‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻜﱪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺃﻭﻡ‬
‫‪ 105‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ 210‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ 265 x 325 x 155‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ 3.12‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻜﱪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﲈﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪12:19:26‬‬
‫‪2011-02-14‬‬
‫‪HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 37‬‬
HT306SU-A2_BARELLK_ARA_3891.indd 38
2011-02-14
12:19:26
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertising